Home

2010 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

1. Hill Start Assist HSA Four Wheel Drive Tire Inflation Pressures 296 a ned Did d e 0 278 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 298 Hill Descent Contiol ADC Four Wheel Radial Ply Tites ies eb es oe a 298 Drive Models With NV245 Two Speed Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 298 Transfer Case Only 00 281 Tib Saf eni EREE ees 299 b dw Hight Fu han m 283 Tread Wear Indicators 300 H Tire Safety Information 284 Lue eds Tire Markings eee 284 Replacement Tires 00040 301 Tie Identification Number IN oae suus 288 la Tue Chains tosses vais eave Bae ae ear nine 302 Tire Terminology And Definitions 289 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 303 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 291 Wi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 304 Bl Tires General Information 295 i E a07 Tire Pressure iiis sese ggg Pireo oyei MERGE Di dui atus d 238 STARTING AND OPERATING es General Information 314 Bl Fuel Requirements 000 315 SUL EDI rae cyan aces inae iod er 315 bZL Engime 292 9 e RE 315 Reformulated Gasoline 316 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 316 E 85 Usage In Non Flex F
2. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Extender 0 0000 45 W Safety Tips Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags ties etwas Ste he tae dane TEE TL 46 Advanced Front Airbag Features 48 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 52 Event Data Recorder EDR 59 Child Restrainits lt sure RE 61 bane Pe a8 Sa 45 W Engine Break In Recommendations Transporting Passengers Exhaust GaS sanige OS a Ag eh See a Ebor Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 522r ehe rasini Esi Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the detented ON p
3. 137 Ignition Off Operation 137 e Te ain Hogs es aig eeea eee Hn E Sunroof Fully Closed cesses qp Cee Load MOOR ot taper sasoiean dai Bi Electrical Power Outlets 0 137 i as ll Power Inverter If Equipped 140 Near VOD VU Wipes Washer a didceiohte ies ll Cupholders 142 Rear Window Defroster 149 W Cargo Area Features 0 000000 eee 143 me MOOR Pup pape RASE M BqUIBDeM iie 10 Cargo Light ge eyo aie e enu Ee red 143 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield 030407085 Adjusting Rearview Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror
4. 348 Jump Starting Procedure Jack LOCA auus diceres races RR are 4 348 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Spare Tire Stowage 000 349 Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle Spare Tire Removal 4 349 Two Wheel Drive Models Only 359 Preparations For Jacking 350 Four Wheel Drive Models Only 360 Jacking Instructions 00 351 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls A flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may run down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways
5. 365 Dimmer Switch Headlight 108 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission ss 391 Oil Engine s eem erue ew hae 369 Power Steering ids Grew alk CR Se Pa pe dina 264 Disabled Vehicle Towing liess 359 Disarming Theft System llle 20 Disposal Engine OW 45s diaais pe the ae ee dee rna 371 Used Engine Fluids 371 Door Locks 221g geen obs SOS done pee eda 28 Door Locks Automatic eee 29 Door Opener Garage 0 0 00 eee 128 DIVING P PR sedan eg nam ean 258 Oif Pavement 0 6 00 tierse tutak 259 Off Road cus ofa reta PERO PARS RUE 259 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 174 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 82 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 137 Electronic Brake Control System 270 Anti Lock Brake System 450 INDEX eae Brake Assist System 00000 271 Electronic Roll Mitigation 272 Electronic Stability Program 273 Traction Control System 271 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 272 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 116 Electronic Stability Program ESP 273 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 167 Electronic Vehicle Information Center BVIC 42343 asda doe UR tesy Rb Soa eee 164 168 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 252 Hazar
6. Gear Ranges oseta i bee ad pitit eee ee Rocking The Vehicle tsi Bl Four Wheel Drive Operation Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 244 236 STARTING AND OPERATING M Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 253 Shift Positions llle eee 255 Shifting Procedures 0 255 Quadra Drive II System If Equipped 258 E On Road Driving Tips 258 ll Off Road Driving Tips 259 When To Use 4WD Low Range IE Equipped ga aceio eke ree Le 259 Driving Through Water 259 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 260 Hill Climbing 0 000040 261 Traction Downhill 2 4 262 After Driving Off Road 4 262 ll Power Steering Power Steering Fluid Check Bi Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only B Parking Brake E Anti Lock Brake System ll Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Program ESP Trailer Sway Control TSC 263 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237
7. 0 0 0 Sierot i 221 Radio Satellite uconnect studios 214 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 112 Rear Axle Differential 00 387 R ar Camera sues eure Sate eie d s 125 Rear Cupholder iss der iu drea eges 142 ee INDEX 459 Rear Heated Seats 2 0 00 ce eee eee 91 Rear Park Sense System 0004 119 Rear Seat FOIGING isse pres e eretet srs 93 Rear Window Defroster llle 149 Rear Window Features 000000 ees 148 Rear Wiper Washer 000000000 ees 148 Rearview Mirrors 0 00000 eee eee 80 Reclining Front Seats llis 85 Recreational Towing 0 000000 0 338 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 340 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 342 Reformulated Gasoline 0085 316 Remigerant aee sah Awe GIGS deo Xe eu 375 Reminder Lights On 0 0 0 0 000 106 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 000 eee 43 Remote Control Starting System accessu eR RO woe Ga aes 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 219 Remote Starting System 0 0005 25 Replacement Bulbs 000 0000 000 406 Replacement Keys c2 3e b bg ek 18 Replacement Parts eese 368 Replacement Tires erisia nsed iiaa esed i has 301 Reporting Safety Defects 040 440 Restraints Child 0 00 00 eee eee 61 Restrain
8. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses M A i 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service id 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Idi Service Schedule LI Change the engine oil and engine oil filter D Change the engine oil and engine oil 2 Rotate tires A filter Q If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Inspect the front and rear axle fluid J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary E change if using your vehicle for police 2 Inspect the CV joints S taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer 21 Inspect exhaust system C towing J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for H damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423 M A 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule T Service Schedule T Chang
9. e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic Sys tem in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Se VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label
10. To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the liftgate will 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm success fully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition key to the ON position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alar
11. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini m Cavity M Fuse Description Cavity bun Fase Description 18 20Amp Front Control Module 27 15Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow FCM Batt 1 Blue IOD 1 Intrusion 19 20 Amp Lt Trailer Tow Stop Module Satellite Yellow Turn Video Steering Con 20 20 Amp _ Front Control Module igh Module Yellow FCM Batt 3 28 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw 21 20 Amp Rt Trailer Tow Stop Yellow JOD 2 Radio Yellow Turn 29 10 Amp Occupant Restraint 22 30 Amp Final Drive Control Red Controller ORC R S Pink Module FDCM 30 10 Amp Occupant Restraint MOD Red Controller ORC 23 50 Amp Radiator Fan R O Red 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse 27 in the Intelligent Power Module labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD 1 e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type
12. 440 Be Reasonable With Requests 43 MIMOPAR Parts 00000 440 H If You Need Assistance lesse 437 W Reporting Safety Defects 440 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 438 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 438 DSI Leo tetto eT Ini Mexico Contact see Ba ee ee os 438 WV CAMARA wiped ynadon a paai inei 436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Bl Publication Order Forms 441 Traction Grades 0 0 0 0 ee eee 443 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 00 444 Quality Grades 6 0 eee eee 443 TreadWedf 2b See eed Ba E S 443 en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number o
13. Jeep Grand _ 2010 Cherokee __ OWNER S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 4 5 3x dnt oi a seise catcns le 958 RH RUROR aiie id ar RH tts E ACRIOR A CREAR CAL Roe enin 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee nnn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eere hh nn la UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL c eeeeeeee eee hh nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 cee cc cece cece eee e hh hh t m nnn 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 ccc cc cece s cece reece eee eee hh hs 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 ccc cece cece reece ehh hh i hh ht 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cc cece cece creer eee c cere rece e cere eee mnn IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece cece eer cee r cere cece mnn 10 MIND EEX dr RDUM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Mi Introduction 0 00000 00004 4 WiWamings And Cautions 04 8 a Rollover Warning esie anon syed 5 W Vehicle Identification Number 8 Bl How To Use This Manual 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for bo
14. Outside Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver side door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by direction you want the mirror to move Use the off the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver center position to guard against accidentally moving a Memory Seat in Understanding the Features of Your mirror position Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Power Mirror Switch 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Sun Visor Extension If Equipped To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for the visors increased coverage Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED automatically se Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Refer
15. Recline 85 Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment 86 Eight Way Driver s Power Seat 87 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Four Way Passenger s Power Seat It Equipped 45 eds br eR teer Head Restraints Front Heated Seats If Equipped Rear Heated Seats If Equipped 60 40 Split Rear Seat llle lll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory ts are ae eter Gare B a oo paar d Memory Position Recall sius To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To MEMO 3 eanga eae e Re REDE E e d Easy Entry Exit Seat llle ll To Open And Close The Hood 100 pn TP 101 Multifunction Lever 00 101 Headlights And Parking Lights 102 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 102 Headlights On Automatically With Wipers 103 Smartbeam If Equipped 103 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 104 Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only srati niari 0000006 105 Instrument Panel Dimmer 105 Battery Saver Feature 106 Lights On Reminder 0 0 106
16. Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care And Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning compon
17. post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps and chains may break causing seri
18. 021907161 Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigg
19. 4 Cartridge Mini re FUSES Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Interior Fuses 1 30 Amp Audio Amp B The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to Green the left of the steering column 2 15 Amp _ Sunroof B Blue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity oe pied Description Cavity od pins Description 3 10Amp Htd Mirror EBL 10 10Amp Final Drive Control Red Red Module FDCM 4 20 Amp Rr Pwr Out B Heater Ventilation Yellow Air Conditioning 5 10 Amp Rr HVAC R O E d Red Commander Only Pat eee Ire Heater Ventilation 6 Spare Air Conditioning B HVAC Relay Rear 7 20 Amp Door Locks B Park Assist Yellow 11 Spare 8 Spare B pe 10Amp Door Mods O H 9 20 Amp Pwr Outlet B Red Lamps IP Courtesy Yellow Lamps Glove Box Lamp B 13 10 Amp Autowipe R A Red 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini SCCM Cluster R S BUX Trailer Tow Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description 14 20 Amp Cigar Ltr R A 21 Spare Yellow Acc De 15 10 Amp Tire Pressure Tran lay Red sponders R O 22 15 Amp Rear Wiper B 16 10 Amp Upper amp Lower Blue Red Switch Bank Diag 24 10 Amp Power Distribution Connector Cluster Red Center PDC Relays B Powertrain Control 17 15 Amp Flipper Glass B Mod
20. A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ss At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals PE e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires m If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months J Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary
21. CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The driver and passenger outside mirrors will automati cally adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirrors will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts
22. Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam systems can result in civil penalties being assessed age ainst NT ps ba e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over D t try to start th ine b hi towing th materials that can burn Such materials might be ecd y to start tne engine Dy E or towing toe vehicle grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires where your exhaust system can contact anything that disconnected or removed
23. Fog Lights If Equipped 106 Tum Signals 22 s0e eed ess sages 107 Lane Change Assist occas ceses rat degat 108 High Low Beam Switch 108 Flash To Pass 2 ke Pea a dA Rees 108 Headlight Time Delay 108 Interior Lights llle 108 Front Map Reading Lights 108 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 109 Windshield Wiper Operation 110 Intermittent Wiper System 110 Windshield Washer Operation 111 MISE 5 0 Ghd Pou nE NE E TE EN a 112 E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 112 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 114 E Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 115 BE lectronic Speed Control If Equipped lo Activate edi edie eas nd eb oe To Set a Desired Speed 118 TO Deactivate 3 3 cedo rb Aes Sao ba ies 118 To Resume Speed ssssssn 118 To Vary The Speed Setting 118 To Accelerate For Passing 119 arksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 119 Parksense Sensors sarees rinw tasr iai 120 Parksense Warning Display 120 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Enable Disable Parksense Service Parksense Cleaning Parksense System Usage Precauti
24. Heater Engine Block 0000000 242 High Beam Indicator 000005 159 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 108 Hill Descent Control 0 00 281 Hill Start Assist 2 2 i Tine eee eee 278 Hitches Trailer Towing 0 0 0 e eee eee 328 Holder Cup sesseur anesse ete e sons 142 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 128 Hood Release cis fick eo eae n ewe 100 Ignitofi ese eh rey RU race Re ea OS 15 KO M Ecc LI E eh aes 14 15 Ignition Key Removal lesse 15 Illuminated Entty i ne cce RERO oec 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key sess 17 Infant Restraint eaa kea a k a ee es 61 Inflation Pressure Tires 000000 e eee 296 Information Center Vehicle 168 Inside Rearview Mirror esses 80 Instrument Cluster lesen 157 158 Instrument Panel and Controls 156 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 397 Integrated Power Module Fuses 404 Interior Appearance Care 004 396 Interior Fuses i 2ewca ke x49 3 LER 398 Interior Lighting 0 0 0 0 eee 108 Interior Lights csse one Ok Sea Re 108 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 110 TitrOGUChOR 011a asad Wav del wy ERR and he 454 INDEX as Inverter Power 0 0 00 ce ee 140 Jack Location c6s 40 664250340540 e erasa 348 Jack Operation es s m hoc al heeds dong 348 351 Jacking Inst
25. and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Battery Saver Feature If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light position parking light position or the headlight position when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior and interior lights after eight minutes Normal operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the headlight switch is turned to another position Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK ACC a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is located in the multifunction lever To activate the fog lights turn on the park turn lights low beam headlights or the Automatic Headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever A light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog
26. before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servi
27. e The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch e When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Preparations for Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PARK 4 Turn the ignition OFF 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run
28. such as when diagnostic can burn testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tuneup to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and r
29. ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to c
30. 20 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero 21 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 22 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when 23 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light t This light informs you of a problem with the problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible I
31. 440 Washers Windshield 109 376 Washing Vehicle ee nk aka ae aes 393 Waxing and Polishing lt ii tasie aama ised eia 393 Wheel and Wheel Trim 04 395 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 395 Wheel Mounting 000 000 c eae 354 Wind B ffeting xasetesssu cemere des 33 137 Window Fogging llle 231 MindOWS cere br RR RR Re S 30 ROWER Quoad ta Or geared redes At 30 Windshield Defroster 74 223 229 Windshield Washers ciii ceini ea aison piai a 109 Fluid utis ma inne E a EES PE E 376 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 376 Windshield Wipers 000000 cee 109 Wipers Intermittent ssec scies siase esses 110 Wipers Rain Sensitive s4 ised seese tasses 112 CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10WK741 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
32. Control functions are operated leave the system OFF when you are not using it 81bc4c2c 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you or normal brake pres sure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Seiting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h To decrease speed whil
33. Es ba eed Ew EY s 348 Compact Spare ise ed RR READERS 298 General Information 000 295 High Speed sd aes ara kite dca as hae dee A 298 Inflation Pressures 0 0 00000 eee 296 Jacking RR ae Rete 348 Lite Of Tires ou de REC OR STRORUS 301 Load Capacity eee eee 291 292 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 304 Pressure Warning Light 162 Quality Grading siare nia saae huaa ee 443 Radial 4 242223 kp RR AER SERE ER 298 Replacement lees 301 Rotation 22uwce co rk RUE ee eae d Hage 303 c decr m 284 SIZES E 286 SPINNING ecis sited satis aaa iaw d 299 Tread Wear Indicators 004 300 Wheel Mounting 0000 354 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 331 Torque Converter Clutch 0 251 Tow Hooks Emergency 0050 359 Tow Haul Indicator Light 165 Towing si ex c t ye Ir ex 324 359 Disabled Vehicle ees 359 Guide i e ERREUR REPE EE hes 330 Recreational eek eR Re E 338 Weight cese rem 3 9 sires irt de 330 Traction Control 2 csse e Rm 271 Trailer Sway Control TSC 04 278 Trailer Towing s redenn S e ERRE nee 324 Cooling System Tips 000 0 338 loh MC 328 Minimum Requirements 332 Trailer and Tongue Weight 331 Witing 23a tanta OR Aig Pale x ea de ee 335 Trailer Towing Guide 004 330
34. Glove Box Lamp edrr enantir ees 194 Grab Handle Lamp L002825WS5W Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976 Rear Cargo Lamp sss 214 2 Visor Vanity Lamp 000 V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Lamp 0 74 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lamps serye sraa a E 3157K Front Park Turn Lamp 3757A Front Fog Lamps 0005 9145 Front Side Marker 00 tae W5W Headlamps Low Beam High Intensity Discharge HID D1S Serviced at Authorized Dealer Headlamps Low Beam 9006 Headlamps High Beam Rear Turn Stop Tail Lamps NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Dis
35. HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear 3 7L engine or in direct gear 5 7L engine until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 3 Turn the engine off and be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear 3 7L engine or third gear 5 7L engine will be available in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automat
36. Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC i i The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display tures a driver interactive display that is located in the The EVIC consists of the following instrument cluster e System Status e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass Display e Outside Temperature Display e Trip Computer Functions The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip menu Functions Personal Settings and System Sta tus FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select the displayed function YES Y or NO N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 SCROLL Button WF Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features and System Status Messages COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press and release the COMPASS C TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings
37. Locks seorsan tennera Ey eoa 29 Climate Control 2a ey eS eae eea 221 Glock uio estos A E bes 184 185 189 198 Cold Weather Operation 04 241 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 220 Compact Spare Tire iis wes 298 COMPASS css dern o e ae BR Rn dep rera 176 Compass Calibration 00006 177 Compass Variance errs simsi ineas 177 Computer Trip Travel 0000 173 Connector UGI ied tou cnt oe E atenshe x n ere E oe eee 209 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 209 Conserving Fuel 6 2 eee 174 Console Overhead 000000 127 Contract Service 264 4664 handan 3 8 eck 439 Cooling System 380 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 382 Coolant Capacity sew eroe Roe ees 413 Coolant Level escort dep gs 384 en INDEX 449 Disposal of Used Coolant 384 Drain Flush and Refill LL 381 Inspection 22a erex bie p RIA RESP 380 Points to Remember ossea sa taneous asean 384 Pressure Cap euis cbe hie Rekis 383 Radiator Cap ise bares ales dore s 383 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 381 413 Cruis Light 2203 05 eir sses rad 166 Cupholders ss esee eee en ch 142 Customer Assistance 0 000000 cee 437 Daytime Running Lights 104 Dealer Service clem c o Reque ms 368 Defroster Rear Window ss 149 Defroster Windshield 74 223 229 Diagnostic System Onboard
38. RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV NEEL rey 1 a IF EQUIPPED V p NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Tire Pressure Display The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD NOTE player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD e Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi touch screen allows for easy menu selection 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the s
39. Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m x2 NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an
40. Slow down e In city traffic While stopped shift the transmission to NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up v
41. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING e A lap belt
42. The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the Four Wheel Drive Models wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing NOTE The transfer case must be in the NEUTRAL position and the transmission must be in the PARK position for recreational towing 340 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from 1 Press the brake pedal the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is 3 Shift
43. This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RBZ RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
44. Trailer Weight 22224 RATER RETE 330 Transfer Case x vepres 388 Maintenance redde we RR RR ey RU Us 388 Transmission Automatic see 245 389 Maintenance 0 ee 389 DAUR oo eine KBr sare ee ME e ea e Dee 243 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 128 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry llle 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Tread Wear Indicators 000005 300 Turn Signals ccr UCI Connector 464 INDEX ae uconnect Hands Free Phone 84 Underhood Fuses 0 0000 e eae 401 404 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 443 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 209 Universal Transmitter 00 128 Wpholstery Care eese eR Ret px 396 Vanity Mirrors i cesse o seg e xe PY 84 Variance Compass 6 6 0 02 177 Vehicle Certification Label 322 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading 00 00005 292 322 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage 2 ee ne 232 406 Viscosity Engine Oil is neni nunta ar e t 371 Voice Recognition System VR 84 Warning Flasher Hazard 346 Warning Roll Over wesw sae beak Ea 5 Warnings and Cautions 00004 8 Warranty Information 006
45. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 MPEG Specification Samplin fiean Ha Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or d
46. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded usi
47. a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory S SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed al
48. auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or i confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon M LL ane oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood dosed injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Liftgate closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start e Hazard switch oF System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button Battery at an acceptable charge level 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec e RKE PANIC button not pressed onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle Ignition key removed from ignition switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunro
49. be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message 819793f8 will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the Fuel Saver Mode On engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 819793f4 Fuel Saver Mode Off Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km mm estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Trip A Shows the total
50. be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Switch 276 STARTING AND OPERATING es NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off Four Wheel Drive Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu ve
51. been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system ope
52. conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will st
53. crossbars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in one of the seven detent positions retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position NOTE e To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front crossbar in the second detent from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the last detent closest to the rear of the vehicle e If the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception place the rear cross bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when not in use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if CAUTION Continued equipped are not to be used as a towing feature e Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the r
54. decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer 14 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC drops back into the normal range If the pointer Display p E the e ana iim is s s S When the appropriate conditions exist this display oo ds ERE t immediately anc cal an autho shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dS C messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen n ter ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 15 TOW HAUL Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls TOW 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in eithe
55. drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed It provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Shifting Procedures 4WD HI to 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and raise the transfer case T handle The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete Release the T handle 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a 4WD LOW to 4AWD HI transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and raise the tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understand transfer case T handle The 4WD LOW indicator light ing Your Instrument Panel for further information in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete Release the T handle NOTE e If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection con
56. es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case NV140 Single Speed MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Only ATF 4 product Transfer Case NV245 Two Speed MOPAR NV 247 245 Transfer Case Lubricant or equivalent Only Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steer ing Fluid or equivalent which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10838 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emissions Control System Maintenance 418 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 418 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified t
57. folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceed ing 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates ee
58. for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one ha
59. front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags ma
60. front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for QI Inspect the transfer case fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer ill to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident Camrecomzon mo2zrZzm IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicles s 2 5 See oo Sota ees ema D eS 437 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 439 Prepare For The Appointment 437 Service Contract ceca cece vee ee eee bas 439 Prepare A List 0 000000 437 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only
61. hae dee RAI e 410 398 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL carers 2h cree ca PS a ex quw 412 401 Wiis Capacities eee ee teed aeenR eee ges 413 404 Bi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 414 406 Engine uicem Eta Mc Rue s Busca a ess ads 414 406 Chassis oes wee def e ae ees a 415 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 071007234 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Battery 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Power Distribution Center 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Integrated Power Module 10 Air Cleaner Filter 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Distribution Center 6 Integrated Power Module 8 071407236 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 Battery 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 11 Air Cleaner Filter ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well with
62. headlight beam selection instru ment panel light dimming passing light interior courtesy dome lights and optional fog lights The mul tifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel Multifunction Lever 031407547 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights and Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for AUTO to activate the Automatic Headlight system headlight operation Turn to the third detent for Auto matic Headlight operation if equipped 031407553 Multifunction Lever 031407548 Headlight Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 This system performs two functions With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi tion the headlights will turn on and off based on the surrounding light levels Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is eq
63. hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always m drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb 262 STARTING AND OPERATING es Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check the tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Re
64. immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lamps will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lamps and horn will remain on Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Key Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery
65. is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other design
66. is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and
67. is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight o
68. kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg m 5 7L 4x2 12 300 Ibs 5 578 kg 60 sq ft 5 57 sq 7 400 lbs 3 357 kg 740 lbs 336 kg m 5 7L 4x4 12 300 Ibs 5 578 kg 60 sq ft 5 57 sq 7 200 lbs 3 266 kg 720 lbs 327 kg m Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard The addition of pas sengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight GTW Redistributing cargo to the trailer may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of 3 200 Ibs 1 451 kg Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents STARTING AND OPERATING 331 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or e
69. load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 RES RSC Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the O
70. located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully 6 INTRODUCTION AX WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to u
71. may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 aad aa aq5 o5 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 282205 10 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to
72. momentarily in each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE Ifitis necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water fro
73. of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 446 INDEX MM ABS Anti Lock Brake System 268 Adding Fuel 3 Ry eei rrr Es 320 Adjustable Pedals llle 115 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 372 Air Conditioner Maintenance 374 Air Conditioning 4s ex ass sre aere erac 224 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 231 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 375 Air Conditioning System 224 Alt Filtet 5 ested eee eg PP ee R RORIS SERE 372 Air Pressure Tires llle 296 Airbag xac c e esa hsc PS GO RE er ORA 46 54 Airbag Deployment l l sss 56 Airbag Light 000 47 53 58 74 160 Airbag Maintenance llle 57 Airbag Sid iz eas e ed 52 54 Airbag Window Side Curtain 49 52 54 Alarm Paride sarae tense ae eo G A dee Rev eee 23 Alarm Security Alarm 19 161 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio less 215 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 413 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 268 270 Anti Lock Warning Ligh
74. radios etc The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side 022606177 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stac
75. remains on while driving ties contact your authorized dealer NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to lea
76. restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint
77. service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the
78. so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you sti
79. soon as possible by an authorized dealer 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC ru
80. system Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will WARNING decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the changes cooling system pressure cap are a safety precau tion Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any pressure accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used e
81. than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 320 STARTING AND OPERATING EE ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Fuel Filler Cap ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full
82. the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after sev
83. the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down
84. the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage Driving in Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pull
85. the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all p
86. the transmission into NEUTRAL 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off noone vans 4 Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL Shifting Into NEUTRAL Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts recreational towing to blink indicating shift in progress The lamp will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is complete A 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center 5 Start the engine EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 6 Shift the transmission into DRIVE 7 Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 8 Turn the engine off 9 Shift the transmission into PARK 10 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove key fob 11 Apply the parking brake 12 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 13 Release the parking brake Neutral Switch 342 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Transmission damage may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEU TRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK refer to step
87. to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www s
88. transmission temperature This feature improves the warmup time of the engine and transmission If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP message may display and the transmis sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis sion cools down After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine speed and load an upshift followed shortly thereafter by a downshift may occur The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will turn off This is a normal part of the overheat protection strategy when operating in the TOW HAUL mode The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the most desirable gear if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When to Use TOW HAUL Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Se performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under steady cruise conditions TOW
89. use of the wrong power steering fluid ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pu
90. used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy chorage System ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant WARNING Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used restraint in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passen e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety ger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates The second row center position has an auto matic locking retractor Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
91. vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Front Heated Seats If Equipped The front driver and passenger seats are heated The Adjustable Head Restraints controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the heater air conditioning controls The heaters provide the same average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off au When the High level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High level If the High level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min utes Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off NOTE Once a heat s
92. worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your ab domen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack from Belt 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press
93. you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever the engine is running and the transmis sion is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK ACC or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center potion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
94. you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your veh
95. 0 0 0 amatus 86 MeMory agas eae ERG esed ee d aeg 95 nr MP 87 88 Rear Folding i224 Ee e ERR d 93 Reclining 02 cece need b n e i 85 Security Against Theft 005 19 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 161 Selection of Oll Gage eebgda ges Rx ehe 370 Sentry Key Immobilizer llle 17 Sentry Key Programming llle 18 Sentry Key Replacement 18 Service Assistance rodret eae 437 Service Contract 6 0 ee eee ee ee 439 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator llle sess 159 Service Manuals llle 441 en INDEX 461 Setting the Clock 184 185 189 198 Settings Personal ss wih arate eae ER R rr os 178 Shift Lock Manual Override 244 ship PL 243 Automatic Transmission 243 Shoulder Belts llle 36 Signals Turn 2 eee eee 74 107 159 409 410 SmartBeams lere 103 Snow Chains Tire Chains 302 Snow Plow 0 0 ee eee 338 Spare De cis esee eee ge ed 298 349 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 002 315 Qil aces bed SAWS Beh ee ah ed oR dee ea aed 370 Speed Control Cruise Control 116 Speedometer 0 00 eee eee 158 DLar ng sons pc eee es ba ee es 25 240 Automatic Transmission 240 Cold Weather serica arseeni eaa keane 241 242 Engine Block Heater 00 242 Engine Fails t
96. 108 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 283 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 167 EX TIOE iua oce kie nna eee dee 74 BOB cda ee RR ue edd d Anii 106 167 410 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 165 FUSES iret eet See nal Se ie ctn a aye 398 Hazard Warning Flasher 346 Headlight Switch llle 102 Headlights eee xL NEA 407 408 Headlights On With Wipers 103 High Beam Indicator 0 159 Illuminated Entry 0 0 2 0 00005 20 Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 0 0 20 0000 102 InteriOf aane oi doe Boas Fo Ros 108 Lights On Reminder ls 106 Low Fuel 42 auc endorse ert hates 168 ne INDEX 455 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 159 Map Reading E eR Eee ein Grey elk 108 Oil PressSufe 43 iem Ed d aad d a a Shad 161 Passitig nite Sac ore qe Pob ae UR SERA a 108 Reading 4 29 Ee niea SD 108 127 R aroervieig sche hecha aie eae dnas e cr 410 Rear Lal 2223333 95 0448 eaa E PUO 410 Seat Belt Reminder lle 166 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 161 Service ais cag Du Rha Yos P3EX B3 RS RS 407 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 159 Side Marker leere 410 SmartBeams cese 103 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 162 Tow HaulIndicator lun 165 Traction Control 2 0 0 0 cee eee 283 Turnsignal xe Ry 74 101 107 409 410 Vanity Mirro
97. 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 12 7 Quarts 11 8 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Rear Heat 3 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 14 Quarts 13 2 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent With Rear Heat 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 15 2 Quarts 14 4 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Rear Heat 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 16 7 Quarts 15 8 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent With Rear Heat ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended
98. CD player mechanism Continued 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button
99. Customer Programmable Features System Status lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD Nav If Equipped 2 4 4 0 cen Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio lll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode lll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped Connecting The iPod Using This Feature Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons Play Mode List Or Browse Mode Bl Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If quipped REN RER RBZ RES Radios Only tri Syste
100. Front Wiper Control 031507503 Front Wiper Control NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary Pull down and release the control lever for a single wiping cycle 031507504 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the en
101. G Ss pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected In addition a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for 75 seconds when a system fault is detected and a chime will sound If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat pro viding the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a TIRE LOW PRESSURE me
102. GINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the heater cord to a ground fault interrupter protected 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the coolant The engine block heater cord is located e 3 7L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector harness WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Key Ignition Park Interlock into any forward gear when the engine is above This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter idle speed lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot prior to rotating the igni
103. H Dealer Service 0 ee ee 368 Bl Maintenance Procedures 4 368 Engine OIL scenic eater inane RR S 369 Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid iss Exhaust System Cooling System 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System i us coe degen e rad Front Rear Axle Fluid 0 Transfer Cas socero csee RR RE Automatic Transmission Maintenance After Off Road Driving Appearance Care And Protection From COROSION tia e rey e ee rede 3 W Fuses luus enn n RR Interior Fuses 0 00000 eee eee Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module W Vehicle Storage i RR lll Replacement Bulbs 385 W Bulb Replacement 00 407 387 High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID 388 JtEquipped 4 04 scsavead dere res 407 389 Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 408 392 Front Turn Signal 0006 409 Front Fog Lamp se errr cesi erria antras 410 393 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup 398 Lamps eserse kedis
104. HECK TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor s is not being received 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 34 34 81971362 TIRE 35 PSI If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds when a system fault is de tected possibly related
105. HICLE 129 NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu WARNING Continued rity Alarm is active e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan WARNING gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can e Your motorized door or gate will open and close cause serious injury or death while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other Programming HomeLink objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has Before You Begin a stop and reverse feature as required by federal HE you ies nt Acad any ni the FEL PHHODS safety standards This includes most garage door 95 Channels betore you begin maining opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up use a garage door opener without these safety to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor sage states CHANNELS CLEARED mation or assistance Continued 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio
106. ING Se NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Quadra Drive Il System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive II System features three torque transfer couplings The couplings include Elec tronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD front and rear axles and Quadra Trac II transfer case The optional ELSD axles are fully automatic and require no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the units function as standard axles balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed difference As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer case and axle couplings differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac II transfer case shifting information preceding this section for shifting this system ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An adva
107. ION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to Four Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the passenger s seat The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment NOTE The four way seat does not have an up down adjustment WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the
108. Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off When the High level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High level If the High level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min utes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 60 40
109. Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio fac
110. N or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Pho
111. Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or selecting a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Maintenance Sched ule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 5 7L engine Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Cooling System To reduce pote
112. R INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE CD etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the curre
113. RTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Certain models have sufficient tire to body clearance to capacity than what was originally equipped on allow use of tire chains Install chains on rear tires only your vehicle Using a tire with a smallerload index Follow these recommendations to guard against damage could result in tire overloading and failure You and excessive tire and chain wear could lose control and have an accident Continued CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Do not install tire chains or traction devices on ve hicles with larger than P235 65R17 tires Tires larger t
114. Rock Soft Rck 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutt
115. SYSTEM 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING LIMIT SPEED CHECK GASCAP ESP OFF IOD FUSE OUT HILL DESCENT CONTROL MEMORY 1 POSITIONS SET MEMORY 2 POSITIONS SET MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED SEATBELT BUCK LED with graphic MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK DRIVER 1 MEMORY 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se DRIVER 2 MEMORY ADJ PEDALS DISABLED CRUISE CONTROL SET ADJ PEDALS DISABLED SHIFTER IN REVERSE LOW TIRE PRESSURE CHECK TPM SYSTEM LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only SPARE LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only WATER IN FUEL Diesel Models Only SERVICE EXHAUST Diesel Models Only RKE BATTERY LOW VEHICLE NOT IN PARK IGNITION POSITION PRESS BRAKE TO START INSERT KEY TURN TO ON ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Gasoline Engines Only Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval
116. Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the air conditioning compressor is on This is a normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped The Automatic Temperature Control System automati cally maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls NOTE The numbers on the temperature dial represent a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO and not the actual air temperature Turn the mode control on the right knob to AUTO and then turn the blower control on the left knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the comfort setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the com fort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF O position on the blower control knob stops the system comp
117. Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily 1 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle to release 030906036 Rear Seat Release NOTE Do not fold the rear seat down with the center seat belt buckled 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Fold the rear seat completely forward WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint Rear Seat Folded system To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position 030906037 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Storage Rear Seat Armr
118. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions seat belt People belted together can crash into one 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and another in an accident hurting one another badly adjust the seat Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued WARNING Continued e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a click plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt 3 go around your lap Latch Plate to Buckle Latch Plate ee THINGS
119. YOUR VEHICLE Se It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
120. adiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly may result in engine damage and may decrease dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine cool ant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Selection Of Coolant the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool possible ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further c
121. afercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 442 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving main taining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy
122. al sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significa
123. ance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un defined Note Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Program Type 16 Digit Character Display College College Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Country Country Sports Sports Foreign Language Language Talk Talk EL e iS so os 0 D og Jazz Jazz pee Weer News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon I Nostalgia Nostalga is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected Music Type name The Personality Persnlty Music Type function only operates when in the FM Public Public mode Rhythm and Blues R amp B If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Music Rel Musc Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Religious Talk Rel Talk exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft
124. and failure Rear Power Outlet 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw of the center console to convert DC current to AC current power from the vehicle s battery even when notin This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life exceed this power limit as will most power tools and or prevent the engine from starting 0 D XD Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power Inverter ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device h
125. and the outside temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e TURN SIGNAL ON e PERFORM SERVICE e DAMAGED KEY KEY DOES NOT COMMUNI CATE 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME KEY NOT PROGRAMMED KEY NOT PRO GRAMMED WRONG KEY KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO VEHICLE KEY NOT PROGRAMMED EXCEEDED KEY PRO GRAM LIMIT PROGRAMMING ACTIVE NEW KEY PRO GRAMMED SERVICE SECURITY KEY DRIVER PASSENGER DOOR OPEN with graphic LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN with graphic X DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS OPEN with graphic HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic HOOD GATE DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD GATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS HOOD OPEN with graphic ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 WASHER FLUID LOW with graphic COOLANT LOW with graphic OIL CHANGE REQUIRED OIL CHANGE RESET CHECK GAUGES AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF PARK ASSIST DISABLED SERVICE SUSPENSION SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURE SERVICE 4WD
126. ard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurri
127. art to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has three available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range two available operating modes on two wheel drive vehicles and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 High Range Four Wheel Drive Models or Two Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD HIGH range and in two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESP system will
128. as been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter Press the power inverter switch located on the upper switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch again to turn the power off Power Inverter Switch NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indica tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console Front Cupholders The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that pull out from the lower center of the rear seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lights Push on t
129. assenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt sti
130. ating ante eas vies wee cae a wae 315 Requirements sraa iens 0 0 c eee eee eee 413 Saver Mode s s ku ER RERRG Pe RES 174 Tank Capacity sls 413 Fuel Optimizer 2 e Ew 174 Fuel Saver llle 174 Fuel System Caution isses 318 320 FuseS i 2eseycoec9 Gee he LEY P eed ee aS 398 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 128 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 320 321 365 Gasoline Fuel isle 315 CONSERVING raga Rae aep EUR eoe dog e dinis 174 Gasoline Reformulated s 316 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 316 Gauges Coolant Temperature 05 163 Fuel 22222222 6 ERR edhe eee piris 167 Speedometer ess 158 Tachometer cw korai eer RE EE 161 Gear Ranges ae ho ahs tense e Ress 245 General Information 0 18 25 314 Glass Cleaning xr pue RE pgs 397 Gross Axle Weight Rating 322 325 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 322 324 GVWR 344 sd44 424648 rese es RE HE 322 Hands Free Phone uconnect 84 Hazard Warning Flasher sesca atei nesedi eias 346 Head Restraints llle 88 ne INDEX 453 Head RESTS 5s e Ree Re aed tee 88 Headlights i eese t Edere oa 102 407 Bulb Replacement c esi tiroiden annet ers 408 Cleaning garsas need ete Ee Rar ee ara 397 On With Wipers sis b IE REILR 103 Replacing xa de eror airau der nikas 408 Heated Mirrors leen 83 Heated Seats llle 89 91
131. ay be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during the summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer additional engine cooling may be required If this situa tion is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an a
132. built up heat from driving Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equip ment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Term Definition Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passen ger vehicles Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Term Definition Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the bead
133. by can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the WARNING Continued vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types actly when installing an infant or child restraint of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the A rearward facing infant restraint should only be lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an
134. ccupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across th
135. charge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 073305864 1 High Beam Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 2 contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing 013303994 1 High Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorte
136. child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during
137. cing or replacement in the future ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bot
138. cks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the wi
139. clude the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after
140. cludes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected NOTE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position Recirculation This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates which indicates that the Recircula tion mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temperature humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and ham per visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation mode to be selected while in the defrost or E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 defrost floor modes Attempting to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it m
141. contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean recommended over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked 4 positive and negative and identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tes
142. could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the If Engine Fails to Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and 242 STARTING AND OPERATING Se release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up EN
143. creen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change
144. ct spare installed Damage to the vehicle may tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear result indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which Tire Spinning apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h mm Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time 300 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be rep
145. d recommendations On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ParkSense will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 to 59 in 30 to 150 cm from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense warning display located in the headliner near the flipper glass provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle ParkSense Display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 When the ignition is turned to the ON position the The system dimly illuminat
146. d Warning Flasher 346 Jacking siae e m feme en 348 Jump Starting sies ke RE Ehre 355 Tow Hooks 2 266 e RR m 359 Emission Control System Maintenance 366 418 Engine AGE Cate estos REPE WOES sy 372 Block Heater eile er Redes 242 Break In Recommendations 71 Compartment secer tesi ceded estis 363 364 Compartment Identification 363 364 Cooling iore kac gs ER Red ud x Ys 380 Exhaust Gas Caution llle 72 319 Fails to Statt isses seco Rr Rn 241 Flooded Starting 0000050 241 Fuel Requirements 00 315 413 Jump Startins sso kd Dr eder ees 355 Multi Displacement 04 265 Oil su rex d xx RE RENE e SO SERO 369 413 Oil Change Interval eas su taath onia 370 Oil Disposal sy eget hen a ARS s 371 Qil Filtet sieer chines EHE eR 372 Oil Filter Disposal sells 371 Oil Selection ce eet Ren 370 413 Oil Synthetic iuis eoe toe eoe f eg 371 Overheating drra des dubai kanast a nes 346 nn INDEX 451 Starline 46nd iux dae ee dee s ER y s 240 Temperature Gauge 00050 163 Engine Oi Viscosity ism REPRE RS 371 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 371 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 55 Entry System Illuminated 20 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 72 319 378 Exhaust System 0 se ee ee ee Eini 72 377 Exterior Finish Care 393 Exterior Lights 74 Filter
147. d of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 NOTE The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position following conditions e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switc
148. d turn on A C If it s cloudy or vat dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature Q a Ta control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost S D UN CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and bg TY i Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear TOME m COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 4 In very cold weather if if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor S Jor Goan Defrost W as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 41352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures iere rr 240 Normal Starting 004 240 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 000 241 If Engine Fails To Start 241 After Starting soe saae b caw ee Pale os 242 lll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 242 Bl Automatic Transmission 243 Key Ignition Park Interlock 243 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Overfid soene seis Sab he a ls eee E WE Five Speed Automatic Transmission
149. damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity The optional crossbars must be installed using the correct orientation the longer crossbar toward the front The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to prevent movement To move the
150. damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the ET windshield This number also appears on the Automobile VIN Location Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment ee INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS un Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys asc ku eens 14 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 19 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 Rearming The System 19 Key FOB 522v coe ene ea ren 15 To Set The Alarm e RR ym 19 Removing Key FOB From Ignition 15 To Disarm The System 000 20 Key In Ignition Reminder 17 W Illuminated Entry 12 2 gh 20 W Sentry Key iiusecessa ke REX 17 W Remote Keyless Entr
151. de in a cargo area Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could per
152. desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 HDC is intended for low speed off road driving only At vehicle speeds above 30 mph 48 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h HDC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indi cator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running e function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition switch cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on co
153. disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push de sign Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open Push the finger depression to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
154. distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Display Units of Measure In To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for two seconds Current display will reset along with other functions Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction O the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated To complete the calibration process drive slowly 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles in an area free from magnetic material until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The Compass will now function nor
155. dition exists a CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Shifter T Handle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 e Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the complete A 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center erly aligned Several attempts may be required for EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur further information The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift NEUTRAL Shift Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 2 Vehicle stopped with foot on brake 3 Place the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED light by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will i stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL Neutral Switch 258 STARTING AND OPERAT
156. driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Lock When YES Y is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Flash Lamps with Lock When YES Y is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is sel
157. dshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears When NO N is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tio
158. dy care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu CAUTION Continued lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR paint and decals Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the Special Care aint p EP e If you drive on salted o
159. e 200 164 346 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 441 Paint Canes m 393 Paint Damage seas seo eo baud eae ea wales es 393 Panic Alarm 458 INDEX ae Park Sense System Rear 00005 119 Parking Brake aues rea sdb Reus 265 Passing Light 122i fed ERRRS DRE 108 Pedals Adjustable cscs sss mm 115 Personal Settings 24 3x gas e Ceres X Hake 178 POTS seo art edes Ree emere 71 Pets Transporting 44 euo n 7 Phone Cellular oraret cd mae mederi 84 Phone Hands Free uconnect 84 Placard Tire and Loading Information 292 Polishing and Waxing 0005 394 Power Distribution Center Fuses 401 Door LOCKS ccs eee eee e m m ras 28 Inverter uses i ens wees Cs tye aoe abono 140 MBETOIS 2adscequ eu dvo ae ed Ge oe 82 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 137 SeatS succ Eno e E RE dee gas GR dU RE 87 88 DLeeflDg aane ere eak eng Seniesa ia a E dns 263 264 SUPIFOO e doe aue bee artes e eia es dd des 135 WIDndOWS s soraia madner SP dre d n o Aa 30 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 45 Preparation for Jacking 00040 350 Pretensioners Seat Bells ue peor ep ere E ERES dr 43 Programmable Electronic Features 178 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 20 Quadra lraC 4 2442 cesGleesGaaeadavete eves 253 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 00 eee eee 298 Radio Operation
160. e in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range is used only when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing you to limit the highest available gear For example if the driver ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 shifts the transmission into ERS 3 third gear the trans mission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed NOTE e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the left the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear that can be attained without overrevving the engine The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and will limit the top gear to the one displayed e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the right the transmission will exit the gear limiting mode and shift to the appropriate gear The display will read D 3 7L Engine When in the DRIVE position the first tap to the left will shift down one gear and will display that gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear when you tap the shift leve
161. e erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System If Equipped The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81350206 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Controls 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss The instrument panel features four dual vane airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Blower Control The blower control rotary knob on the left controls the blower and can be set to one of four speeds and OFF The blower fan motor will remain on un til the system is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower con
162. e fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended main tenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer ser vice station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and o
163. e interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light Driver Front Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se nae erm The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver MSN and front passenger airbags This system provides output e No objects should be placed over or near the appropriate to the severity and type of collision as airbag on the instrument panel because any such determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash which may receive information from the impact sensors severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate at the front of the car Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band
164. e levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light STARTING AND OPERATING 307 A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate a warning mes sage to appear or the chime to sound X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will display in the instru ment cluster for 60 seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire 308 STARTING AND OPERATIN
165. e pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or w
166. e stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be eject
167. e test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
168. e the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph WARNING 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the slippery vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF speed up and down hills A slight speed change on EQUIPPED moderate hills is normal ParkSense provides visible and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system an
169. e the engine oil and engine oil filter E T Change the engine oil and engine oil 2 Rotate tires N filter m If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the A T Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary N T Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary C Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and M Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet E 5 7L Engines off road or frequent trailer towing S T Adjust parking brake on vehicles J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for C equipped with four wheel disc brakes damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary H 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid E D U L E Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer l 424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M A V 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service i 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Idi Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Ll 4 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires A filter Q If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect
170. e tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold t
171. e upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81c0f01e 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in th
172. e vehicle could skid Screen Displa 1 2 3 4 b D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 Allowed Applies to vehicles equipped with 5 7L engines only NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear for 3 7L engine fourth and fifth gears for 5 7L engine The transmission will automatically shift to Overdrive if the following condi tions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 e transmission has reached normal temperature operating NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice de layed upshifts depending on engine and
173. ected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Auto High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Headlamps On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlamps Only When YES Y is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped When YES Y is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the win
174. ed before a new disc can be loaded 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of es UNDERSTANDING
175. ehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in the passenger side compartment behind the second row seat Jack Storage Location ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening CAUTION Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism Lowering Raising Spare Tire b Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION
176. elay Seats 26 15 Amp Brake Lamps Green Blue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Cavity M od ind Description Cavity wo aah Description 27 20 Amp HD Washer If 36 Spare Yellow Equipped Export 37 20 Amp Ignition Switch Only Yellow 28 30 Amp ABS Valves 38 20 Amp HID Left Green Yellow 29 20 Amp PCM Batt Gasoline 39 20 Amp HID Right Yellow Only Yellow 30 Spare 40 25 Amp Next Generation Con 31 Spare Natural troller NGC Injectors 32 15 Amp Powertrain Control 41 20 Amp Subwoofer SRT Only Blue Module Diesel Only Yellow 33 20 Amp _ Final Drive Control 42 Spare Yellow Module FDCM E Diff 43 25 Amp Coils Actuators 34 Spare Natural 35 20 Amp Trail Tow Mod Export 44 Spare Yellow _ Only 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module Cartridge Mini Cavity uae Fasc Description 9 10Amp Irailer Tow Park Red Lamps 10 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps Red 12 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 4 13 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 2 14 20 Amp Adjustable Pedal Yellow Integrated Power Module 15 T Pt Fog Lamps Cartridge Mini EP 16 20 Am Horn Cavity Fuse Fuse Description ele 8 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps 17 20Amp Rear Fog Lamps Ex Red Yellow port Only
177. enting the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Tire Terminology and Definitions Term Definition Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa before a tire has
178. ents solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xg 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Fuse Panel
179. eplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e If the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod9 mode and access a connected
180. equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compa
181. er Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Heavy Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Model GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt Tongue Wt See Note 3 7L 4x2 8 400 lbs 3 810 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg m 3 7L 4x4 8 500 Ibs 3 855
182. er filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 0C O O O O M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 21 Rotate tires M Change the engine oil and engine oil J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the CV joints not done at 60 months Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Li LI O C O M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair O
183. er is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Se benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the tractio
184. er the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up Pull the window switch up and close the window com pletely then pull and hold the switch for one second Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again Window Lockout Button 021907160 en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the ha
185. eral seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition sw
186. es the two outer most yellow warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The one second Each side of the warning display has six following chart shows the warning display operation yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the when the system is detecting an obstacle obstacle when the red LED is ON WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow Yes Half Second 2nd LED 51 in 130 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 45 in 115 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 20 in 50 cm Red Yes Intermittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Yes Continuous 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enable Disable ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located on the upper switch bank of the instrument panel Press the switch once to turn ParkSense on push the switch a second time to turn Park Sense off P OFF When the switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED message Refe
187. est If Equipped C4 The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage armrest Armrest Storage Latch DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the Rear Seat Armrest driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator storage bin pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro position The memory system can accommodate up to grammed to recall the same positions when the UN four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the LOCK button is pressed two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The Driver Memory Switches system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters One to complete the memory recall before c
188. etting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Rear Heated Seat Switches After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select
189. eviously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off road use only 4WD Low Range Full Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESP system will be in this Full Off mode In WD LOW range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4WD LOW range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was pre
190. f a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If
191. f items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should in
192. f the light is flashing when the engine is running reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will the ignition switch is in the ON position Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the running your vehicle will usually be drivable however immediate service is required and you may experience come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 24 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 25 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 26 Low Fuel
193. frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995
194. g police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary mi mi mi mi mi mi mi mi L oo Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E 8 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule mi mi mi O O O O L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for crac
195. g ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Turning ParkView On or Off Without HomeLink and power sunroof switches may also be Navigation Multimedia Radio included if equipped 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will
196. gers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs 204 STARTING AND OPERATING Se AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs O
197. h HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING Continued e HSA is nota parking brake If you stop the vehicle WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With NV245 Two S
198. h is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as de sired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may resul
199. han this may not provide sufficient body clearance with chains or other traction devices Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only Follow tire chain manufacturer s instructions for mounting chains Install chains snugly and tighten after 0 5 mile 1 km of driving Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h unless otherwise specified by the chain manufacturer Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and extreme driving maneuvers TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation 304 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotat
200. hange the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate Gi amis E GE 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on
201. he SERVICE when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle the instrument cluster look behind you and be sure to check for pedes CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located Continued trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park Sense to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING Continued PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear System it is strongly recommended that the ball pack Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for i put
202. he SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details ee UNDERSTANDING YOU
203. he engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat bladed screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Interlock Manual Override ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used Five Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmiss
204. he lens surface a second time to restore the interior lights to normal operation Rear Storage Compartment The rear storage compartment is located on the driver s E side behind the second row seat Rear Cupholders CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multifunction lever to the extreme top position If all doors are closed and only the liftgate is open pushing on Rear Storage Compartment 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place Rear Cargo Cover ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING In an accident a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle Cargo Tie Down Hooks The cargo tie down
205. he safety of others ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos sible electronic interference caused by improperly in stalled aftermarket radios or telephones e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping e Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electro
206. hedule E J Rotate tires T Change the engine oil and engine oil N 1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter A 1 Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine T Rotate tires N J Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines d Inspect the front and rear axle fluid 11 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes change if using your vehicle for police I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer S JJ Inspect the CV joints towing C Inspect exhaust system H M Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary D 1 Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s U Change the transfer case fluid L J Replace the accessory drive belt s s Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or Schedule 138 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 2 Rotate tires T Change the engine oil and engine oil J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessar
207. heels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 13 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer CAUTION ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you
208. hicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel EE Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if yo
209. iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this b
210. ic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in DRIVE NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Manually shifting using the ERS shift control between 4 direct gear and 5 D Overdrive gear positions will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive For vehicles with 5 7L engines which have two Overdrive gears 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive gear normal fifth gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque conve
211. icle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer 326 STARTING AND OPERATING es Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to
212. il filters can be safely discarded in your area 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information at every oil change Hum ON Sdn The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The provide a measure of protection in the case of engine quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only backfire Do not remove the air induction system air high quality filters should be used to assure most effi cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary cient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is oil filters and are recommended near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters WARNING varies considerably Only high quality filters should be e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are to
213. in current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened The message will remain displayed until the vehicle diagnostic system can retest the fuel system The test will perform the next time the vehicle is started if the vehicle was
214. ing ias ee ERR ee en eri asses 265 Warning Light a aus area dns 158 Brake Transmission Interlock 244 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 71 Bulb Replacement ss ess ras sroda cheas 406 407 Bulbs Light usse ga ae ee ae EREE eae 74 Calibration Compass 00 0000 0006 177 Camera Rear de kn ea Big eae Ge a Bi ae A 125 Capacities Fluid so ease done e enm 413 Caps Filler Fuel 2e Rae DERE RE EG EA Rs 320 Power Steering eee 264 Radiator Coolant Pressure 383 Car Wash s Lasse ue 2 oe ee dah oe Rx ead 393 Carbon Monoxide Warning 72 319 Cargo Area Cover sk nex x hoe Kea es Cargo Area Features Cargo Compartment 448 INDEX ae LG ses hawt ied Seed acdoe Sha ea SA wee 143 L ggage Carrier siiper e e ia gatas as 150 Cargo Light 22 42 RE pERPS PX RS 143 Cargo Load Floor e 147 Cargo Tie DOWMNS 2 253 9 eae Ee Y 145 Cargo Vehicle Loading 0 322 Cellular Phone llle 84221 Center High Mounted Stop Light 412 Certification Label llis 322 Chains Tire ausa e dore RE OS Gees 302 Changing A Flat Tire cies ei 348 Chart Tire Sizing osse n n 286 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 366 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 72 Checks Safety seed esie o BER ERE 72 Child Restraint seres 61 66 68 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 65 66 Child Safety
215. ing a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a
216. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or x Power Sunroof Switch any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the su
217. into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the towing Failure to do so can result in injury or Navigation Multimedia radio display screen The Park damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch view camera is located on the rear liftgate WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the ParkSense sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage Park View should only be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when usin
218. ion The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued 246 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e tis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicl
219. ion do not start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women WARNING We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can the best way to keep the baby safe increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustabl
220. ion method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram LPS t c E 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has
221. ire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original
222. ire will set the SPARE LOW PRES SURE message but it will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR TIRE 35 34 PSI 24 amp 34 8197133c Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 311 The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information C
223. isabled Shifter In Re verse Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con side of the steering wheel trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on Electronic Speed Control Lever when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec set the system or cause it to go faster than you want tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut You could lose control and have an accident Always down if multiple Speed
224. itch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any
225. k luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use
226. keyed off above 40 F 4 C outside temperature and the following vehicle start is above 40 F 4 C outside temperature It may be possible to have a message that will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low outside temperatures If the test is performed and the problem is gone the message will disappear If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off See your authorized dealer for service EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to th
227. ks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule LI Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter LJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air clean
228. l RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by movi
229. l cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they sho
230. l components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level Continued specified above 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deteriorati
231. laced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tires The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 302 STA
232. lected or if you manually select a blower speed Under certain conditions after the vehicle is turned off the climate control system may recalibrate and a noise may be heard for 20 seconds This is part of normal operation es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 e Most of the time when in Automatic operation you Manual Operation can temporarily put the system into Recirculation This system offers a full complement of manual override mode by pressing the Recirculation button However features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic under certain conditions in automatic the system is Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature blowing air out of the defrost vents When these Control and Manual This means the customer can conditions are present and the Recirculation button is override the blower mode and disable the Automatic pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This Temperature Control completely tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation mode at this time If you would like to go to Recircu lation mode you must first move your mode knob to Panel Panel Floor or Floor then press the Recircula tion button This feature will reduce the possibility of window fogging NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Automatic Temperature Control Operation The System will Mode Air Temperatu
233. les Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unautho rized operation When the alarm is activated the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals The horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an addi tional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself
234. letely NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation How ever if the driver and or passenger temperature knobs are set to the full hot or full cold positions the air temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME respectively With the temperature setting in these posi tions the system does not attempt automatic comfort control Air Conditioning The air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash three times and remain off This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary Recirculation The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing this button will tem porarily put the system in Recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause the LED to illuminate NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor s location Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto matic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up However the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is se
235. lf times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels
236. lights are on 031407550 Front Fog Light Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 NOTE e Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog lights e A front fog light is a lighting device that provides illumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of fog rain snow or dust The front fog lights supple ment the low beams of a standard headlight system e Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other drivers Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the m
237. ll can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether over the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Always remove the subwoofer from the vehicle whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer are required for proper installation of a child re straining device In the event of an accident or under severe vehicle maneuvers leaving the subwoofer unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle b Tether Strap Mounting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in
238. ll must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC ON posit
239. ll the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied vehicle speed is detected the light will flash and a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to gu
240. lluminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Flash Lamps with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Se
241. located on each front door Manua Poor LOGES panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of Power Door Lock Switch vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door juries and death will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021707162 en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa
242. ly in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the Key Fob as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If strument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC s
243. m You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to un lock any door They will remain on for approximately 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021408059 Key Fob with Three Button RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The i
244. m Activation 205 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 219 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Satellite Antenna Reception Quality Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped Radio Operation CD Player E CD DVD Disc Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones Bl Climate Controls Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System If Equipped Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped Operating Tips Operating Tips Chart 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81bf40b4 1 Air Outlet 5 Upper Switch Bank 9 Lower Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 10 Climate Controls 3 Radio 7 Storage Bin 11 Ignition Switch 4 Glove Compartment 8 Power Outlet 12 Storage Bin UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 819e550f 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 2 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking b
245. m entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake discs brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action After driving off road completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check the tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegeta tion or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body compo nents all driveline joints and steering linkage more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle bo
246. mally es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be dis played in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 P
247. may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Service Distance e Display Units of Measure In Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode E e Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset rF LET A HUEE HODE When the fuel economy is reset the display will read e RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the LL iP gaa MEI E history information will
248. ment cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone e If a ParkSense system malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM If this occurs making sure the rear fascia bumper is free from snow ice mud dirt and debris see your autho rized dealer Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly ParkSense might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear WARNING fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close e Drivers must be careful when backing up even object as a sensor problem causing t
249. minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7 Engine All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations 87 and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un Boodiabe leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 STARTING AND OPERATING 315 for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these e
250. mit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stone
251. n press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Hill Start Assist To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or MET RIC appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears System Status Press and release the MENU button until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e System OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pres sure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting And Operating ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pres sures in Starting And Operating for additional information e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ TA AM FM STEREO
252. n a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rup ture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point before attempting a jump start 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission Positive Battery Post into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 CAUTION 3 If using a another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this damage to the charging system of the b
253. n afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP for a complete explanation of the avail able ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving
254. n bulb life If the contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Fog Lamp Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Turn the front fog lamp bulb one quarter turn coun 2 Remove the two Torx fasteners terclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 81572594 073305865 3 Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the 1 Tail Stop Lamp Bulb 3 Back Up Lamp Bulb housing 2 Tail Turn Signal Bulb um 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the CHMSL 815727fa ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 7L and 5 7L Engines 21 Gallons 79 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 5
255. nboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 6 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to 9 eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition N switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting sta
256. nd they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size mm stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have The Trailer Tow Package includes a seven pin connector brakes when you need them and could have an at the rear of the vehicle and a four pin harness located accident under the rear bumper The four pin harness must be Continued unclipped before use Use a factory approved trailer arness and connector 336 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector 7S 3 Refer to the following illustrations 9 0O d F 0O eS 3 O lt 2 Seven Pin Connector 057003765 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003766 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn Four Pin Connector 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps Female Pins 4 Park Hectic Brakes 2 Male
257. nded with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system Continued CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke y
258. ndle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 81351aac Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass may the window switch located on the liftgate automatically rise Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connec tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel 8144ded8 Liftgate Glass Release en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the ve
259. ndshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Comme
260. ne Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will ret
261. necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second row center seat belt with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you stil
262. ng parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Se TT a WARNING The power steering system requires the use of MOPAR Continued operation with reduced power steering Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10838 Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end en 25 the CRETAE xen dama 8e your power Eds steering components Such damage is not covered by of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering the New Vehicle Limited Warran fluid temperature and it should be avoided when ty possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF or other types of power steering fluids when servicing the power steering system of this vehicle Damage to the power steering system can result from the
263. ng unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C WARNING Continued To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get able from your authorized dealer is recommended it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel
264. ng you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 WARNING Continued CAUTION The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing The ABS cannot prevent accidents including sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard those resulting from excessive speed in turns This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety e When descending mountains or hills repeated brak or t
265. ng formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension
266. ng the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door 031305631 Safety Latch Location CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Hood Release 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights turn signals
267. ngines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available 316 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 1076 Ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon mon
268. nic Stability Program ESP All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC and if it has four wheel drive with the NV245 two speed transfer case Hill Start Assist HSA and Hill Descent Control HDC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine pow
269. not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver s seatback all models and on the left side of the passenger s seatback if equipped eE Moving the lumbar control lever forward and rearward Manual Lumbar Control will increase or decrease the lumbar support ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Eight Way Driver s Power Seat WARNING The driver s power seat switches are located on the out board side of the driver s seat The bottom switch controls Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The top dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could switch controls the seatback recline adjustment cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Seat Switches 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUT
270. nroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manuall
271. nt track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can caus
272. ntage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand When to Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by
273. ntial for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOW PLOW Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision WARNING Do not add a snow plow winches or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING Towing Quadra Trac I9 Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even Recreational towing is not allowed This model does not have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death Towing Quadra Trac lle Quadra Drive Il
274. ntinuously with the engine running a mal 284 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position Tire Markings e Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP System will be ON even if it was previously turned off e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 054903773 1 US DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades en STARTING AND OPERATING 285 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except f
275. ntly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
276. ntrol knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode e LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob
277. o G4 8 0 FUELFALNUE REARWNDOW WWDSMELOWATNER DOMELINT FRONT FOGUGHT HOCORELEANE LOWERAM RECHCULATON CONYERTISLE TRACTION ALL WHERL FAILUME OF ANTHLOCK ABER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WBIOGW DOWN CD THOT DmvE BRAKING SYSTEM m QJ C DE Qt c3 3 se WA awo srake WNOSHELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC ERAKE SYSTEM fNGNE UR Rtamwanow ELECTRICALLY PARKUGHTE REAR FOGLAMP AND TOATE VENTILATING FAN WINOOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED LONER AN OUTLET COWTROL DRIVE BRAKE hy TOW E3 sy4ms296lit BATTERY HEATEO MORON WINOSWELD IMEYRUMINMTPANEL SEAT BELT RIDING DOOR AMCCOMOITNMC OuLn SEAT necoovmon MARYNA TOW wau amp HAROING DEFROST ALLUMMATION TETEA ANCHOR BUTION C A w e GO N c iL kt vA e GLOW PLUG POWER WWOSMEiDWeER SOFARSAD sanan SUOWG0OOM peame HIGHTEA ANOTEMIERFOR UCOMECT HAZARD FOUN WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASMER CHRLOREN LATCH BUTTON wt LOW srs EX AIC C E S88 75 fmm M og sn 8 MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL DOOR ALAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE woan SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC WDCATOR UGHT OW TEMP TEWPERATUAS RESTRAINTSYSTEM AIRSAG OFF TOP OOWN TOR UF MANUAL SO CONDITIONER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010507683 8 INTRODUCTION Se WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in
278. o Start 00 0 241 Remote sect e de d pe ERE RR wedded 25 Steering POWER 22 adekicesce BA Ang pons cx BE Reale ew 263 264 TG COMMA zs cere e Seid Shale So 114 Wheel Tilt ia setio hid RE RR UR X edad es 114 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls Storage Storage Behind the Seat Storage Bin Storage Compartment Center Seat Storage Vehicle Storing Your Vehicle Sun Roof Sun Visor Extension Sunglasses Storage Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 462 INDEX MM Sway Control Trailer 000 00 278 synthetic Engine Oil 14 sess d er Es 371 System Remote Starting llle 25 Tachometer iocur RU doa CR 161 Telescoping Steering Column 114 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 224 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 163 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 65 Theft System Arming 000004 19 Theft System Disarming 0045 20 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 6 0 0 0 00a ee 145 Tilt Steering Column ius saaa iana ee eee 114 Time Delay Headlight 108 Tire and Loading Information Placard 291 292 Tire Identification Number TIN 288 Tire Markings csc gules pce hp wars Rees 284 Tire Safety Information 05 284 Tines sree cits oa clits St Sats bow IEEE ES 74 295 443 Air Pressure 20 ilz o iia eias 296 CHAINS a quarter RUE Mag Ine RUE HR ROI aukea 302 Changing sesi ssepe
279. o ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since
280. o monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM 314 STARTING AND OPERATING es SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
281. of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 deploy the SABIC airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad dition
282. of op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is
283. omfort can be maintained Bi Level gt e Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow The center console outlets deliver condi tioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air b Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Recirculation The recirculation feature can be selected with the mode control knob You may choose be tween Bi Level Recirculation and Panel Recir culation air outlets while in this mode Nor mally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning To turn on the Air Conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the snowflake button located on the control panel Conditioned air will be directed through the outlets selected by the mode control A light in the snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on
284. ommended by the manufacturer Fluid Level Check 3 7L Engine will result in more frequent fluid and filter Regular fluid level checks are not required For this changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu reason the dipstick is omitted ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Fluid Level Check 5 7L Engine Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips To check the fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever
285. on in transmission shift quality and or torque converter Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that rec
286. on twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the
287. ons ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera It Equipped i uk cese a bx aee a e Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio E Overhead Console sees Courtesy Reading Lights Sunglasses Storage ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 122 Programming HomeLink 129 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 132 Using HomeLink ss 133 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button e on cee ed tages med een IS 133 Security s c o EM Rr c RE Ra RS 133 Troubleshooting Tips 6 133 General Information 4 134 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 135 Opening Sunroof Express 136 Closing Sunroof Express 136 Pinch Protect Feature 0 136 Pinch Protect Override 136 Venting Sunroof Express 136 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Sunshade Operation 136 Rear Storage Compartment 143 Wind Buffeting e cepere ERE 137 Retractable Cargo Area Cover f If Equipped sn i402 ceca n 144 Sunroof Maintenance
288. ons The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code repres
289. ontinuing to or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory Step 3 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK
290. oof If it is necessary to place the load on the fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Continued 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instrument Panel Features 156 E Instrument Cluster 0 0008 157 Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 158 lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 168 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays i e RE ER xe RR i aus 169 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 172 Trip FUnCHONS i269 sais ceg gea aie 173 Compass Display sess 176 Personal Settings
291. oolant antifreeze products Do not use addi information tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued When adding engine coolant antifreeze e This vehicle has not been designed for use with The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent coolant antifreeze is not recommended Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine 37 C are anticipated coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ized water when mixing the water engine coolant ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water period it is important that you use the same engine will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle engine cooling
292. ooster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive 4 post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative
293. operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes a
294. or the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 286 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol Asymbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditi
295. or those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower at tachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regard less of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you m
296. ord in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other configuration parameters depending on vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny ba
297. osition Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will results in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the WIN to disarm theft alarm To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE e If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In shift lever in PARK it may become trapped tempo rari
298. ounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as
299. our engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of Methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as exhaust gases from entering the vehicle a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more
300. ous injury TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Two Wheel Drive Models Only Provided the transmission is operable tow only in NEU TRAL at speeds not exceeding 30 mph 48 km h for distances of not more than 15 miles 24 km CAUTION Towing at more than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 15 miles 24 km can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be Four Wheel Drive Models Only towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all 15 miles 24 km remove the driveshaft or tow with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the CAUTION vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly Towing this vehicle using any other method could result in extensive damage to the transfer case and or transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Engine Compartment 3 7L 363 Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L 364 E Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 365 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 365 lll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PrOStaM Sea esce ir dre oet Se bte hares 366 li Replacement Parts 5 2 m 368
301. own the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 TIME Button Auxiliary
302. oxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system com ponents Problems that result from using Methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 Ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher Ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline ble
303. pare tire the TPMS will update automati cally and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare t
304. pce oh ee ee 368 440 Multi Displacement Engine System 265 ee INDEX 457 Multi Function Control Lever 05 101 New Vehicle Break In Period 71 Occupant Restraints 00005 35 52 56 Occupant Restraints Sedan 49 52 54 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 315 Odometer lees 164 166 TED sss be ek cR Ru RR que aci tea 164 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 259 392 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 259 392 Oil Change Indicator 00040 172 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 0 172 Oil Engine ssi sae e Ene ed Rd a tas eg ae 369 Capacity acce 44 tes 9 ab EE SURE bes 413 Change Interval 0 000040 370 DISH EE 369 Disposal a ised xm bebe nes oR 371 Filter aotreet eree eane arte aks Soave es a 372 Filter Disposal 20523 er ee Seen 371 Identification Logo 1 2 6 0 2 ee eee 370 Materials Added to 00040 371 Recommendation eae 370 413 Synthetic ise ba OES ee te e e hoe edi Edo 371 VISCOSITY dges d or aed Fa E Race e dos 371413 Onboard Diagnostic System 365 366 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 128 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 0 81 Overdrive cesse be RR TREE 248 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 00040 248 Overhead Console 0 000 000 eres 127 Overheating Engin
305. peed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range press the HDC switch If the HDC switch is pressed when the vehicle is not in 4WD LOW range the light in the switch will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Hill Descent Switch 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss When HDC is properly enabled the message HILL DESCENT CONTROL will appear in the EVIC and the light in the switch will be illuminated HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed when necessary HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will usually not activate on level ground The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans mission gear selected e 1st 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 25 mph 4 km h e 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h e 5th 7 5 mph 12 km h e REVERSE 1 mph 1 6 km h e NEUTRAL 2 5 mph 4 km h e PARK HDC will not function HDC also has the capability to sense rough terrain and will automatically adjust to a slightly slower set speed about 0 3 mph 0 5 km h than normal HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is
306. period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few WARNING Continued thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter Do not allow people to ride in any area of your preted as an indication of difficulty vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts SAFETY TIPS e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ri
307. quipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for further information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an acciden
308. r zs eed eoe ee e 84 Voltage 456 INDEX as Load Floor Catgo xis vex Rer see XR 147 Loading Vehicle 44 een d Res 322 Tir s 414994 E eee P Res aan wd ps 291 KOKS ces oed vit t tu 28 Automatic Door llle 29 Child Protection 0 0 00 0 cee eee 29 DOOR sea o453 4 406 RE ORG behead d 28 Power Door 0 2 0 0 ee 28 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH RR R3 4445 Einm Ea ESS E SER 65 66 Lubrication Body 2 ee 375 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 4 150 Lumbar Support lees 86 Maintenance Free Battery 04 373 Maintenance Procedures 0 000005 368 Maintenance Schedule 0 00005 418 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 159 366 Manual Service 441 Memory Feature Memory Seat 95 Memory Seat iere ores SORA aes 95 Memory Seats and Radio 95 Mini Irip Computer 4 ses er RR ERR 173 MINON jacere V due Saeed Pee ee 80 Automatic Dimming lesse 81 Electric Powered 82 Electric Remote 00000000 82 Exterior Folding ossia tii ddie a a eee eee 82 Heated uere ha r e REI a 83 Outside 6 od Sees rem RE eR RRTEPS 81 Rearview sv Gea ee awa o bREIDGETrRESCG 80 Vanity ose vetat aaa ale ave aU aco ie 84 Mode Fuel Saver 3 4 sce pete ceeded RE sare 174 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System 304 Mopar Parts 4 aas
309. r Temperature Control Operation When the Mode knob is set to any position other than Auto the Temperature knob operates in the non automatic comfort condition The numbers on the Temperature dial are no longer valid in this mode This mode allows the user to select any desired air temperature When the temperature knob is in full conterclockwise position the air temperature will be Cooler As the knob is rotated clockwise the temperature will increase gradually until the knob reaches the full clockwise position 817dd45b es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 NOTE Regardless of the type of operation when a temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full counterclockwise position the system will deliver full hot or full cold air out of the ducts respectively The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions When the Mode is set to any position other than AUTO the automatic control of air temperature is disabled The user must adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem perature Defrost GH Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained NOTE The defrost mode is not automatically selected It m
310. r dusty roads or if you drive e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint a month finish e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges CAUTION of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularl
311. r one time to the left the transmission will downshift to fourth gear and the dis play will show 4 Another tap to the left will shift the transmission into third gear 5 7L Engine On vehicles equipped with the 5 7L engine use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional under drive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear improves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades ERS 1 2 and 3 are underdrive gears ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 Overdrive is the same as the normal fourth gear When in the DRIVE position in first through fourth gear the first tap to the left will display the ERS designation for the current gear the transmis sion will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Se gear When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear the first tap to the left will downshift the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and th
312. r outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced The front power outlets are located to the left and right of the convenience tray lower center of instrument panel Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access these power outlets 034607157 57 Front Power Outlets The power outlet located on the left side of the tray can be used to power a conventional cigar lighter UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left WARNING rear cargo area To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock
313. r the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 17 4AWD LOW Indicator If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in H Ow the 4WD LOW mode The front and rear drive shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 19 Cruise Indicator cruise ThS indicator lights when the speed control system is turned ON
314. r to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is disabled the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the message The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when the system is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service ParkSense When ParkSense is defective the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM ap pears in the EVIC after making sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and free of snow ice mud or other debris see your authorized dealer Cleaning ParkSense Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep ParkSense operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instru
315. rability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information In this mode ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 in the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was pr
316. radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
317. rake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE O If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with
318. ration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressur
319. rcially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx WARNING Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst Breathing it can make you unconscious and can damage eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know CAUTION Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion
320. rder Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 21 Rotate tires M Change the engine oil and engine oil J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary W Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 iil A 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or Schedule 126 Months Maintenance T 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Sc
321. re Air Recirculation AIC Operation How Blower Control Control Control Control Operation Full Automatic Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Operation Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature be overridden knobs for Comfort Blower Preferred Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Automatic desired airflow level other 1o any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for Comfort Mode Preferred and Set mode knob to any desired Automatic Although Manual Manual automatic User selectable User selectable Manual Air Temperature air delivery point Adjust Auto Lo or Hi can be control of air temperature outside or A C on or off Control Temperature knobs to select selected a manually is disabled User must recirculated the desired temperature selected airflow level adjust temperature is reccommend for knobs to obtain the the optimum comfort desired temperature Full Manual Set blower knob to any desired Manual Manual Manual automatic User selectable User selectable Operation airflow level other than Hi or control of air temperature outside or A C on or off Lo Auto Set mode knob to any is disabled User must recirculated desired air delivery point other adjust temperature than Auto Adjust Temperature knobs to obtain the knobs to select the desired desired temperature temperature Manual Ai
322. recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time 813ac107 Front Map Reading Lights WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for the windshield wiper blades from returning to the high speed wiper operation park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Turn the end of the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired delay interval The delay can be regulated from a maxi mum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 1 2 second 031507503
323. ress the SCROLL button until Compass Variance is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the variance number Continue until desired number is reached 5 Press either MENU SCROLL or COMPASS TEMP button to set the value and exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the Uconnect gps if equipped Press the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage NOTE The EVIC will not change the Uconnect lan guage selection Auto Door Locks When YES Y is selected all of the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Auto Unlock On Exit When YES Y is selected all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
324. ressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tir
325. rking brake The transfer case N Neutral position increased tire wear and damage to driveline components disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4WD HI This range is used on surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NEUTRAL This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four wheel
326. rn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash rec
327. rol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not b
328. rter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position Rocking the Vehicle If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator NOTE The Electronic Stability Program ESP and Traction Control System TCS if equipped should be turned OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting and Operating for further information The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between First and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Q
329. ructions llle 351 Jump Starting Jua ate es acc Race Peat nca 355 Key Programming 6660 18 Key Replacement 0 00000 ess 18 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 17 Key In Reminder 0 0 00 0 c eee ee 17 Keyless Entry System 00000 20 KEYS ovans ach Gee aghast tole a actly Se eae ns 14 Knee Bolster ccc eee ee ee i rs 47 Lane Change Assist 0 000 000 00 108 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 36 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 65 66 Latches 42250 eue RR a se fae ses 74 Lead Free Gasoline 0 0 eee ee 315 Leaks Plaid 2230464 EG xS PI erg Ea 74 Life Of Tires us cp OS RE RERO ORARE 301 Liftgate coke eta re ER RHENUS arde 33 Liftgate Flipper Glass llle 34 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 148 Light Bulbs ces cea rs 74 Lights oeae ae VoU hoe ra a oe ree 74 101 ADAE setae ee eae Ne dS 47 53 58 74 160 Antt Eock 2 3 esee oes bounds t Pes 161 Automatic Headlights 102 BackUp cede e bee ee cede coepere ux cag 410 Battery Saver acca sacr GS wen eases a 106 Brake Assist Warning 06 283 Brake Warming llle 158 Bulb Replacement 00000 407 CarpO ise Aw nd ma anea a kaa eal edis 143 Center Mounted Stop 00 412 Cr lSe 2s ded vee a ees ados e de eae dene 166 Daytime Running scena Ran b ee 104 Dimmer Switch Headlight 101
330. s Aur Cleaner gems RR se ae ela eles 372 Engine Qil iiic uus ie Soap ed ace doa edes 372 Engine Oil Disposal sess 371 Finish Car amp csse a e aes 393 Elashers zit ete eom oie as Scher See 346 Hazard Warning esee th eb er ees 346 Turnignal 2 22 2 6l ERI 74 159 409 410 Flipper Glass Liftgate aati eases 34 Flooded Engine Starting 4 241 Fluid Capacities i seen is EE LEG 413 Fluid Leaks llle 74 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 389 390 391 Brake 2 5 3 h 803 40 a bedes oe OS ated badd Gd 386 Engine Oil cassi cee eed e en 369 Power Stering uviichese ed eR YR WEE 264 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 414 Fog Light Service 52 62 4 cR RR 410 Fog Lights i sera 106 167 410 Folding Rear Seat llle 93 Four Wheel Drive 0 0000 ce ee eee 253 Operation amp voco due Rex bi tea E 253 SYSTEMS eskani ote aol Pese are ees 253 Four Wheel Drive Operation 253 Four Way Hazard Flasher 346 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 452 INDEX es Front Axle Differential lesen 387 Front Heated Seats 0 0c cee eee 89 Buell 2 2 625 de Ad oO0 See Cae RE ae Pees 315 CONSERVING anres Soak ood CR Read aera Reser 174 Filler Cap Gas Cap ses view RR Res aa 320 Gasoline ssa cr ede OR alee dr Reis 315 Gauge ari sa erede ed edd SET e P 167 Materials Added llle 318 Octane R
331. s located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Down Hooks 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e To help protect against personal injury passengers e Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerou
332. s nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS M Mirrors eean ranana kana eee Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped Outside Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 84 Sun Visor Extension If Equipped 84 ll Uconnect phone If Equipped 84 ll Voice Command If Equipped 84 aed oro eso pinti CSE IEn TAES 84 Front Manual Seat Adjustment 85 Front Seat Adjustment
333. s 7 and 8 above Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Press the brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The lamp will stop blinking go out when shift is complete The 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will no longer be displayed on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash CAUTION Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Neutral Switch 5 Shift the transmission into PARK 6 Start the engine 7 Shift the transmission into DRIVE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E Hazard Warning Flashers 346 W Jump Starting Procedures 355 H If Your Engine Overheats 346 Preparations For Jump Start H Jacking And Tire Changing
334. s are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on a individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar 292 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FR THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU NEVER EXCEED XXX P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
335. s may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be periodically inspected Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer
336. s projectile in a sudden stop or collision ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Cargo Load Floor The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility procedure One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic lined tray which holds a variety of items NOTE The cargo load floor latches should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip up the pull loop s so they are perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are parallel to the slotted hole in the tray 3 Lift the tray over the loop s and reposition the tray 4 Pull up on the loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are perpendicular straight up to the slotted hole in tray 5 Push the loop s back down so they are parallel to the Cargo Load Floor top of the tray 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the switch upward to the On position to activate the rear wiper KM NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the switch upward to the washer posi
337. s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Front Rear Axle Fluid This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard Front Axle Fluid Level Check oE prolonged braking jestung auden Drake Lubricant should be to the bottom of the oil fill hole failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in Rear Axle Fluid Level Check spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing Lubricant should be 1 2 inch 1 cm below the oil fill the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also hole 7 damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Addin g Fluid taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces nate the brake fluid Brake sea
338. s stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions NOTE A tire should be stowed with the beauty side up Storing the tire upside down may result in scratching or damage to the wheel face Continue winching up the tire until you hear the winch ratchet three times en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the underbody of the vehicle Damage to the winch cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose WARNING Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools may damage the winch mecha nism 12 Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo area JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING When temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte i
339. se driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 Ser Bu D 4 BAS L MA Ge A tLECTPONC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSMIELO WFER EXTERIOR OULD WGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS HEATEO SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE FLECTROWIC PROGRAM DRAKE DUTLET SPEED CONTHOL ASENST SYSTEM urfbPtbrrkbx nu atan WINDOW WASTER LIGHTING LOW SEAM REV ACTIVATE UPPER ANOLOWER HEATED SEAT WONIWLIFT TE PRESSURE MILLOESCENT Ro INTERMITTENT WIPER Lus POWER OUTLET AR OUTLET MONTON CONTHOL BRAKE S cea wey QD Qo C7 Do
340. ssage will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for 75 seconds For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 sound a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for 75 seconds and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the s
341. st to the inside of the Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface wheel when jacking on the rear axle Do not raise the and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Alway
342. t 161 Anti Theft System o oo hes 161 Appearance Care s esse rere dne ie 393 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 19 Assist Hill Start 5 unsere Rea uES 278 Auto Down Power Windows 31 Automatic Dimming Mirror 81 Automatic Door Locks 0 0 00 00005 29 Automatic Headlights 04 102 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 224 Automatic Transmission 00 245 389 Adding Fluid c gt siriccrssivrscsess iseis 391 Fluid and Filter Changes 389 Fluid Level Check 0 000 390 391 Fid Typeci see bent inte reru deen bee 389 a INDEX 447 Special Additives lt ieri e Uer haces 389 lorque Conv rter ii scena ss ba pre RR Rs 251 Autost ck i222 9 mde eR REY 246 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 137 Auxiliary Power Outlet 00 137 Battery iiegea ka d nioebiee Pape e rebus 373 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Saving Feature Protection 106 Belts Seat ee eee 36 73 Body Mechanism Lubrication 375 B Pillar Location cece ee eee 291 Brake Assist System ce aee Deasa aur ga aas 271 Brake Control System Electronic 270 Brake Fld ue ER Re RE URS 386 Brake System ios uev E inrter REFERT 385 Anti Lock ABS ngia n daa Ka 268 270 Eluid Check uem Ie eee 386 Master Cylinder irse peg ex 386 Park
343. t Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not e GCWR must not be exceeded overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can e Total weight must be distributed between the tow cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels Continued vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory
344. t Drive belt condition should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Lo
345. t in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals forward away from the driver 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward CAUTION toward the driver Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal s or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in adjustable pedals path REVERSE R or when the Electronic Speed Control is on A message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Set or Adjustable Pedal D
346. th on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information en INTRODUCTION 5 This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
347. the N J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary C Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary E LJ Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system S C Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for H damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the followin
348. the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher ee lt lt Jack Warning Label 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown Connect jack handle driver 1 to two extensions 2 then to the lug wrench 3 060505250 Assembling Jack Tools 1 Jack Handle Driver 2 Extensions 3 Wrench 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front axle place it under the front lower control arm Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 8141842b 8147326d m Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location For the rear axle place it under the axle near the wheel to 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise be changed Ensure the jack is close
349. the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California
350. the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss SETUP Button Pressing t
351. the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 3 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km 4 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 5 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an o
352. the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL cont
353. the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier trailer tongue weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and brak ing performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi tional information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 057007122 057007121 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 057007120 Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg with the optional Trail
354. thylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals and children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This
355. tighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and duri
356. tion to activate that rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park If the liftgate flipper glass is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause
357. tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Child Protection Door Lock The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child Protection Door Locks If you push up on the lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle Push the lever down to disengage the Child Protection Door Locks WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Child Protection Door Lock WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front
358. tion switch to the LOCK posi is firmly on the brake pedal tion The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the ignition switch in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position without starting t
359. to Voice Command in the Uconnect Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle Illuminated Vanity Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment Recline Front Manual Seat Adjustment To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near at the desired position To return the seatback lift the the floor Using body pressure move forward and rear lever lean forward and release the lever ward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Do
360. to the trigger component In this ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 case the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is then fol lowed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a chime to sound a Low Pressure message to appear in the EVIC and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value flashing Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message and the graphic display will show a tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able t
361. tom of the SAFE firi range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicl
362. trol is left in the O Off position 812d1942 Temperature Control The temperature control rotary knob in the center controls the air tem perature The coldest temperature set ting is on the extreme left and the warmest setting on the extreme right of the rotation The knob can be posi tioned at any point on the dial 812d193c Mode Control The mode control rotary knob on the right can be placed in several posi tions Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the occupants to fine tune airflow distribution wi 812d192f Defrost GH Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Defrost Floor Ge Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in the floor mode so that c
363. ts Occupant 00000 35 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 144 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 252 Roll Over Warning ssl 5 Root Type Carrier i2bee ce Y esas ee 150 Rotation Tires uvae 86 ee a Ra 303 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 73 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 74 Safety Defects Reporting 440 Safety Exhaust Gas Safety Information Tire 460 INDEX eae Safety Tips is Vues cou eme ed eere d ate gos 72 Satellite Radio Antenna liliis 215 Satellite Radio uconnect studios 214 Schedule Maintenance sess 418 Seat Belt Reminder eee ues 43 Seat Bells gu od ans Boe arta Wik Goes es RR E and 36 73 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 41 And Pregnant Women 0006 45 Child Restraint esr eoe tamaua Rar 61 68 Extender lle 45 Front Seat 23 455 424443 544 ek ced b er CaaS 36 Inspection 54 62 usera gee eee cals ee eos a s 73 Maintenance sais cae xke ae dace dA 398 Pretensioners llle 43 R munders 2 mezeseii rbee4debimus yea 166 Shoulder Belt Anchorage llus 41 Sedis bons Sheek etr Ere EN Bou KLARE ee a ee 84 Adjustment za esed Ree ex oe ea sed 85 Cleaning 4 sans with rb dn gore e Rn 396 Easy Entry aces kx eR rey RR e s 99 Head Restraints llle 88 Heated 1a iiec ia gge s deae weed 89 91 Lumbar Support 0
364. ttings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass Press the FLIPPER GLASS LIFTGATE RELEASE button two times the second press within five seconds of the first press to open liftgate flipper glass WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then
365. u are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best
366. uadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac I is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time four wheel drive No driver interaction is required The Brake Traction Control BTC System which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction NOTE The Quadra Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions where AWD LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Oper ating for further information Quadra Trac ll Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD HI mode The Quadra Trac II9 transfer case provides three mode positions e 4WD HI e NEUTRAL e 4WD LOW This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW WARNING position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at You or others could be injured if you leave the the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD Neutral position without first fully engaging the LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause pa
367. uel Vehicles 316 MMT In Gasoline 0000 317 Materials Added To Fuel 318 Fuel System Cautions 318 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 319 B AddugPugd zzizece cern ee endian 320 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 320 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 321 B Vehicle Loading 4 2 RS REY 322 Certification Label 0 00 322 H Trailer Towing as iau she bx Rer Rae 324 Common Towing Definitions 324 Trailer Hitch Classification 328 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 330 Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight 331 Towing Requirements 005 332 Towing lips sec e deeb du ead as 337 Siow Plow m 338 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 338 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 239 Towing Two Wheel Drive Models 338 Towing Quadra Trac II Quadra Drive II Four Wheel Drive Models 339 Towing Quadra Trac I9 Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models 339 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leavi
368. uipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Activate 1 Select Auto High Beams Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 2 Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from
369. uld use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments f
370. ule A580 R S Blue 25 10 Amp Shifter Assy BTSI 19 Spare Red Trans Case Switch R S ESP ABS Trailer 20 10 Amp Steering Column Sway Damp Relay Red Control Module es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center i Cartridge Mini ee Cavity Fuse Fuse Description 2 40 Amp HID Headlamps Green 3 50 Amp PTC Heater 2 Diesel Red Only 4 30 Amp Power Outlets Pink 5 50 Amp PTC Heater 3 Diesel Red Only 6 30 Amp Cig Lighter Trail Tow Pink Batt SM 7 40 Amp Power Liftgate Com Power Distribution Center Green mander Only Cartridge Mini M 8 40 Amp Starter JB Power Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Green 1 50 Amp PTC Heater 1 Diesel 9 20 Amp Front Power Windows Red Only Blue 10 Spare 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Cartridge Mini ds 4 Cartridge Mini ET Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description 11 40 Amp HVAC Blower 19 40 Amp JB Power Green Green 12 30 Amp Rear Wiper Ign R O 20 30 Amp Wiper Motor Pink Pink 13 40 Amp Rear Window De 21 20 Amp Fuel Pump Green froster EBL Heated Yellow Mirror 22 20 Amp TCM A C Clutch 14 30 Amp Rear HVAC If Yellow Pink Equipped 23 25 Amp _ Power Inverter 15 Spare Natural 16 50 Amp ASD 24 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats Red Yellow 17 30 Amp ABS Pump 25 20 Amp Final Drive Control Pink Yellow Module FDCM 18 40 Amp Accessory D
371. ultifunction lever toward the steering wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released Headlight Time Delay This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multifunction lever must be rotated to the Off position after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK ACC Only the headlights will illu minate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Interior Lights The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights below the instrument panel an overhead console light which contains both driver and passenger reading lights read ing lights located above the rear doors and a rear cargo light Opening a door pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or turning the center of the multifunction lever to the extreme up position will activate all interior courtesy lights Front Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 lens a second time There are also reading lights located above the rear doors Each light can be turned on by pressing the front
372. upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es s WARNINCHConinued You will want to have the airbags ready to e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate the airbag system is designed to be mainte accidentally or may not function properly if modi nance free if any of the following occurs have fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho an authorized dealer service the system immediately rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach switch is first turned ON ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized e The light remains on after the approximate six to dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso eight second interval ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili The light comes on and
373. ur Wheel Drive Models With NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 8 grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing wit
374. urn a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone bal
375. ust be manually selected when desired Defrost Floor Ge Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in floor mode so that comfort can be maintained 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Bi Level Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and off during manual operation only Conditioned out side air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button in
376. ust use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instruc tions refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces A Latch Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat 3 N 022606033 Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Improper installation of a child
377. utomatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS L lt and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle Ww set the Mode control to Recirculate cJ with A C on and roll up the windows O Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel __ or Bi Level 7 pulls with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel an
378. utton at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE co
379. vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passen
380. viously cleared 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA Fo
381. y However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up ap proximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Powe
382. y RKE 20 Replacement Keys 0 000 18 To Unlock The Doors 21 Customer Key Programming 18 To Lock The DoofS xn RR Rem 22 General Information 4 18 To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass 23 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Remote Open Window Feature If Power Windows 000005 30 a ee Wind Buffeting sisse 33 Uong TOS Raa dt eater a ees an pBtrco c M ECC PED 33 Programming Additional Transmitters 23 Liftgate Flipper Glass 0 ce eee 34 DG a Nagai aan Occupant Restraints 00000 35 General Information 05 25 Lap Shoulder Belts see 36 M Remote ireng SySIERD E EQU DEN seers e Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 37 HOWTO Loe RESIS yotar eeina a Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 41 l8 Door Locks o act ek Eee eee eee ee 28 Energy Manassment E eno ones 42 Manual Door Locks 00 28 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode Power Door Locks ies re Rh 28 Jf Equipped 4442 es 42 Child Protection Door Lock 29 Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 43 la Windows 0 eee eee 30 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert8 122 ebd 43
383. y Rotate tires 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule L 21 Rotate tires Change the engine oil and engine oil J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary M Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and off road or frequent trailer towing 5 7L Engines Rotate tires LI LI LI M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 JJ Inspect the CV joints T Adjust parking brake on vehicles Q Inspect exhaust system equipped with four wheel disc brakes J Inspect the
384. y deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup 0 Y 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
385. y with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR
386. your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission 5 7L only and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M
387. ys on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 7 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System 85 ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 8 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 9 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 10 Oil Pressure Warning Light EA This light indicates low engine oil p

2010 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents